giao an tieng anh lop 3 20142015

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of preparing: 16/8/2014 Date of teaching: 18/8/2014 Period 1: INTRODUCTION I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson: - Students will be able to know structure of new book: Tiếng Anh 3 - Students also understand more about the importance of learning. II. LANGUAGE CONTENT: 1. Grammar 2. Vocabulary III. TECHNIQUES: Questioning and brainstorming. IV. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook. V. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s students’ activities Students’ activities 1. Greeting 2. Orals 3. Practice Learning English helps us be known Teacher tells students that they will more one language, know about be learnt English in this year. culture, customs…of English people. It Teacher explains the reason why also helps us communicate with students should learn English. foreigners…. Having 20 units (3 sections in 1 unit). We will learn 4 periods in a week Teacher presents students units and and after 1,5 weeks we will end 1 unit. sections in English 3. We will have 4 tests for 35 minutes and 2 test for 15 minutes. Having 6 characters and 9 icons were regular used in the process of Teacher introduce characters in text learning book and icons in text book Listen to teacher lecture the lesson Teacher makes careful Learn the lesson at home recommendations to students what to Do homework need in class and at home. Prepare new lesson. 4. Consolidation and homework Prepare unit 1: Section A (1,2,3). Date of preparing: 16/8/2014 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of teaching: 19/8/2014 Period 2: Unit 1: HELLO Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and selfintroduce. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Hello/ hi. I’m + name. - Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, nice to meet you. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils’ books, note books …… 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Say hello to the class and introduce yourself, using Greeting Hello. I am + name. Walk around the class to say hello again to some pupils and ask them to answer. 1. Look, listen and repeat Look at the picture and Ask students to look at the picture in the book and ask: answer Who are they in the picture? They are teacher and Where are they? students Ask students listen and repeat after the tape They are in the class Repeat again and read in pairs 2. Point and say - Teach vocabulary: Hello Hi Am = ‘m Nice to meet you. Checking: What and where Note: difference between Hi / Hello. Hi is very informal. Pupils can use with friends but not with an adult, e.g a teacher. Hello is also informal and friendly but more formal Listen and repeat after Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. than Hi. It can be used with teachers and other adults. Setting the sense: - Have pupils look at pictures. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Who are in the pictures? What are they doing? - Sentence Partners: - Hello - Hi. I’m + name I’m + name (I’m = I am) - Call on a pair and ask them to pretend to be Miss Hien and Nam to act out the greeting exchange. Call on one more pair to act out Mai and Quan to selfintroduce. Have the class repeat all the phrases in this section and Teacher correct the Ss pronunciation (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation) - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments if possible. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to greet and self- introduce. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 the teacher Slap the board. Work in pairs. Work in pairs. Do exercises. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Date of preparing: 16/8/2014 Date of teaching: 21/8/2014 Period 3: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and selfintroduce. 2. Skills: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Say hello to partner. 4. Listen and tick Greeting - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 7 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick Listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to read the text. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the Work in pairs dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. Answer: 1. Hello, I’m 2. I’m, Hello. 6. Let’s sing Listen and sing - Introduce the Hello Song, Page 7. - Play the recording and listen the Hello Song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and Do exercises in the clap the rhythm. workbook - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 16/8/2014 Date of teaching: 22/8/2014 Period 4: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to greet and respond to greeting 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine - Vocabulary: bye, goodbye, Thanks, And you? How II. Teaching aids: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing Answer the teacher’s oneself. questions 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 8. Look at the pictures in the Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they book are saying. Set the scene: we are going to review phrases saying hello and bye. Listen and repeat Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the Read in pairs lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Teach vocabulary: Bye=goodbye How Thanks= thank you And you - Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8 Look at 4 pictures Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step Point to the pictures and with some other pairs for pictures practise Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps do 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 25/8/2014 Period 5: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and respond to greeting. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing oneself. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer:1.d 2.c 3.b 4.a 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue 1, 2 in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1.Goodbye 2. Bye 3. Fine 4. thank you 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Answer the teacher’s questions Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number. Read in pairs. Write the suitable words to fill in the blank. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. How 2. I’m fine, thanks Do exercises in the 4.Consolidation workbook Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 25/8/2014 Period 5: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and selfintroduce. Greet and respond to greeting and self-introduction. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /h/, /b/ correctly 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to Ask ps to practice in pairs Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. greeting. 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words bye and hello -Introduce the sounds /b/ and /h/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Bye 2.hello 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Hello -Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. -Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 26/8/2014 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and repeat. Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Period 6: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and selfintroduce, Greet and respond to greeting, and self-introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant Hello 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the questions to the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c. 5. Read and write Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Hello Look at the sentences in the book Read Work individually Work in pairs. Write the suitable words to 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Have pupils open their books to Page 11. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in sentences. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils trade their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Hello 2. I’m 3. Nice 4. How 5. I’m fine/ Fine 6. Project - Introduce the name card. - Explain how to do the exercise: Make name cards about themselves and others. -Ss Present them to class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 fill in the blank Read 5 sentences Read and write. Work individually Work in group. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 28/8/2014 Period 7: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s your name? - My name’s Mai Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Vocabulary: what, your, name, my, is=’s, are=’re II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing hello song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 12 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and Nam, Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: What are=’re Your Name My is=’s check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: What’s your name?-My name’s Mai. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about one’s name. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 28/8/2014 Period 7: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Warm up Ask and answer questions about one’s name 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.a 2. b 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. My name is / I’m 2. Mai/ my name is/ I’m - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The alphabet song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The alphabet song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Practise in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work in pairs. Listen and sing. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. Do exercises in the - Retell the content of the lesson. workbook 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 24/8/2014 Date of teaching: 29/8/2014 Period 8: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A - Vocabulary: How, spell II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 14. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to review phrases What’s your name? My name’s Mai Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: How spell - Elicits the structures How are do you spell your name? –L-I-N-DA 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. about how to spell one’s name. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structure. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 01/9/2014 Date of teaching: 11/9/2014 Period 11: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how Practise in pairs to spell one’s name. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page Look at the pictures in the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 15 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 5. Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to match the pictures to the appropriate dialogues.” Have a revision of the language: “How do you spell your name?” – “L – I – N – D – A.” Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – b; 3-a 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Practice the dialogues in pairs. Practise in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Do exercises in the 4.Consolidation workbook Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Date of preparing: 01/9/2014 Date of teaching: 12/9/2014 Period 12: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name, make and respond to instructions. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words Mai and Peter -Introduce the sounds /m/ and /p/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Peter 2. Mai 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant What’s your name? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of preparing: 14/9/2014 Date of teaching: 15/9/2014 Period 13: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant: What’s your name? - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to greeting. 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. my 2. Hi 3. How 4. What’s 5. name’s 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Work in groups. Interview their classmates. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. Work in groups. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 14/9/2014 Date of teaching: 16/9/2014 Period 14: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: This is Tony - Vocabulary: This II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 13 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to T introduce someone to class, The class greet the newcomer. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats teacher’s part, the other repeats Ss’ part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: This Model sentence: This is Tony. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call someone to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the alphabet song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in groups to introduce someone. Call some groups to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Pactise in groups. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 14/9/2014 Date of teaching: 18/9/2014 Period 15: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer about the specific information. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask Ps to introduce someone S introduce someone 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 19 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the Indentify the characters characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. in each picture Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.a 2.b 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. This is / hello, Nam 2.This is/ hello, Phong - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the How are you? song, Page 19. - Play the recording and listen the How are you? song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work in pairs. Listen and sing. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their Do exercises in the pronunciation. Workbook 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 14/9/2014 Date of teaching: 19/9/2014 Period 16: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is that Tony?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t - Vocabulary: that, yes, no, is not = isn’t, it II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make and respond to instruction 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song 2. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 20. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they book are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Is that Tony? Yes, it is. Is that Quan? No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue between Tom and Linda 2. Point and say - Teach vocabulary: That yes No is not = isn’t It Check vocab: what and where - Elicits the structures Is that Tony? - Yes, it is. Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Have Ss look at the pictures on page 21 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss use structure: Is that Tony? - Yes, it is. Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d to practice in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Observe 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Practice in pairs Play role and speak out.. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 21/9/2014 Date of teaching: 22/9/2014 Period 17: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - T asks Ss do after T. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d 5. Look, read and answer Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures a, b, c, d on page 21. Set the scene: “you are going to read the questions and find out the answer.” Have a revision of the language: “Is that Linda?”– “Yes, it is.” Ask Ss to read the questions and answer (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: a. Is that Linda? – Yes, it is. b, Is that Peter? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom c, Is that Phong? – Yes, it is. d, Is that Linda? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom. 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game is played: pupils play in groups of six. Each group has one set of four pieces of paper. On each of which one of the four words is Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number Ps answer. Look 4 pictures. Work in pairs Read the questions and answers in pairs. Practise in groups 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. written, e.g. this, is, and one of the character’s names that they have learnt (Linda or Tony or Tom or Mary). Each group member pick up one piece of paper. Then the pupils in each group put their pieces of paper together in order to make a sentence, e.g. This is my friend Linda. - Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Move around to help with the activity. - When the time is up, call on two groups to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to reinforce their pronunciation. Follow up: - Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their classmates / friends. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook Date of preparing: 21/9/2014 Date of teaching: 23/9/2014 Period 18: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /t/, /j/ correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to introduce someone 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words Tony and yes -Introduce the sounds /t/ and /j/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Tony 2. Yes 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Is that Nam? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in groups and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs. Listen and repeat. Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blanks. Ps listen to the tape and chant. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 21/9/2014 Date of teaching: 25/9/2014 Period 19: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone: 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant Is that Nam? 4. Read and complete. -Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in pictures in book on page 23 T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read chant Observe the pictures. Read the sentences in the book Read and Work individually 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Correct the pronunciation Answers: 1 – this; 2 – hello; 3 – that; 4 – isn’t. 5. Look, read and write Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in pictures in book on page 23 T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answer: 1. Mai 2. Nam 3. Phong 4. Linda 5.Peter 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw their best friend. Then introduce them to class -Ss draw the picture on the board. - Ps listen and give the comment and correct Ps’ errors 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work individually. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 21/9/2014 Date of teaching: 25/9/2014 Period 20: UNIT 4: HOW ARE YOU? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- It’s Tony - Vocabulary: who, Mr, Miss, Mrs II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing how are you song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 24 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to hear Mai and Nam, Linda and Nam ask and answer questions introduce someone. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on four Ps. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Nam 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Who Mr Miss Mrs Check vocab: rub out and remember Model sentence: Who’s that?-It’s Tony. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Quan and Peter to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pair work. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 28/9/2014 Date of teaching: 29/9/2014 Period 21: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped words Work in pairs 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 25 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of Indentify the characters the characters in the pictures and the characters’ in each picture words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick Listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to Indentify the characters in each picture identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 Work in pairs and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Who 2.Who’s that? - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures. Tell pupils that they are going to read the question and give the answer using the information in each picture. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the answer. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation Answer: 1. It’s Tony 2. It’s Mary 3. It’s Peter 4. It’s Linda 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work individually Pair work. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 28/9/2014 Date of teaching: 30/9/2014 Period 22: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How old are you?- I’m eight years old. - Vocabulary: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, How old, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 26. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into three groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the others repeat Nam’s part and teacher’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26 - Teach vocabulary: How old five Year(s) old six One seven Two eight Three nine Four ten - Elicit the structures How old are you? - I’m eight years old. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Miss Hien and Tom to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and 3.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone’s age. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 28/9/2014 Date of teaching: 2/10/2014 Period 23: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils count from 1 to 10. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about someone 4. Listen and write - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and fill the missing information they hear in the blanks. Before listening Ps can guess the answer. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the missing words. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.six 2.seven 3.eight 4.ten 5. Read and tick Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 27. Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to tick the right picture” Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and fill the missing words. Ps answer Look at 4 pictures. Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs. Practise in pairs 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Sing the song Answers: 1 – 6; 2 – 8; 3-10; 4-10 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The Let’s count from one to ten song, Page 27. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front Do exercises in the of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and workbook clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Date of preparing: 28/9/2014 Date of teaching: 3/10/2014 Period 24: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /f/, /s/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils count from one to ten. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words five and six -Introduce the sounds /f/ and /s/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. five 2. Six 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant How are you?. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 5/10/2014 Date of teaching: 6/10/2014 Period 25: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: - T asks Ss to read chant How are you? 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Teach vocabulary: Friend Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – a; 3 – b. 5.Read and write - Ask Ps to observe and identify the characters in pictures. -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise. -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. How old/I’m 3. How old/I’m/years old 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Talk to your friends. Write their names and ages -Ss act out in front of the class. The others listen to Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Observe and identify the characters Read then Fill the suitable words in the blanks. Work in group. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. and give the comment, correct the mistakes 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 5/10/2014 Date of teaching: 7/10/2014 Period 26: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: this is my friend Mary. - Vocabulary: friend II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing Let’s count from one to ten song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 30 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai, Linda and Mary greet and introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Friend Look and find out the Model sentence: Mai, this is my friend, Mary. model sentences – Hello, Mary. Nice to meet you. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the Point the pictures and characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to practise point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask Pactise in pairs them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation Do exercises in the 4.ConsolidationSummary the lesson workbook 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Date of preparing: 5/10/2014 Date of teaching: 9/10/2014 Period 27: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce one’s friend and respond to instructions 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up : play game bingo Play game 4. Listen and tick Indentify the characters - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 in each picture of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the Listen and tick answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Read and write Indentify the characters - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to in each picture identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. This is / Hello 2. my friend/ Hello - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The more we are together, Page 31. - Play the recording and listen The more we are together song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in pairs. Listen and sing. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 5/10/2014 Date of teaching: 10/10/2014 Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: they, they are=they’re, are not=aren’t - Vocabulary: Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’t II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 32. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’t Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in Listen and repeat the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Quan’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to Read in pairs repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue in picture b 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32 - Teach vocabulary: They they are=they’re Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. are not=aren’t - Elicits the structures Are they your friends? –Yes, they are - No, they aren’t Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about friends. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 12/10/2014 Date of teaching: 13/10/2014 Period 29: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about friends. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Jumped words 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.d 2.a 3.b 4.c 5. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph and use the suitable words given to fill in the blanks.” Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – name; 2 – nine; 3 - and; 4 - friends 6. Write about your friends - Have pupils open their books to Page 33. Ask them to read the text. T explains how to do the exercise. - Ss do the exercise. Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Read the dialogues in pairs. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 12/10/2014 Date of teaching: 14/10/2014 Period 30: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. Pronounce the sounds in the letters a / /, e/ / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words that and yes -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. that 2. yes 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Who’s that? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 12/10/2014 Date of teaching: 16/10/2014 Period 31: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant Who’s that? 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the text”. - Teach vocab: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant. Look at the sentences in the book. Find out new 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Who? - Model sentence: Who is that? – It’s Tony. Who are they? – They’re Peter and Linda. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 5. Circle the correct words -T explains how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the sentences in the book and choose the best words given to complete the sentences - do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. friend 2. they 3. Peter and Mary 4. Yes 5. Aren’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: present some friends to class -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 words and model sentence. Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Choose the best answer to fill in the blanks. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 12/10/2014 Date of teaching: 17/10/2014 Period 32: REVIEW 1 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 1-5, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 Ask ps to practice in pairs to unit 5 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the Give the identification characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer Listen and tick with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b 4.a 5. c 5. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 37. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work individually Listen and tick. Work individually. Work in pairs. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Pair works Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of Do exercises in the the class. The rest of the class observe and give workbook comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Date of preparing: 19/10/2014 Date of teaching: 20/10/2014 Period 33: SHORT STORY I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ps ask Ps some questions 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from Ask ps to practice in pairs Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. unit1 to unit 5 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Give the identification. Listen and tick. Work individually Listen and tick. Work individually. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b 4.a 5. c 6. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 37. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in pairs. Pair work. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 19/10/2014 Date of teaching: 21/10/2014 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Period 34: SUMMARY FROM UNIT 1 TO UNIT 5 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 1-5, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions I. Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 Ask ps to practice in pairs to unit 5 II. Fill in the blank with one suitable word : Fill in the blank 1.This is my ………….. library. 2.I am ………….. thank you. 3.Good morning,………….. Minh. Listen and speak 4.May I ………….. out? 5.How ………….. your mother? 6.She ………….. my sister. 7.What ………….. its name? 8.………….. name is Mimi. 9.………….. to meet you, too. 10.Goodbye. ………….. you soon. 11.This is his friend. ………….. is Trung. 12.Is ………….. notebook old? 13.No.it is ………….. .It's new. 14.………….. . I'm Joanna. 15.My school is big ………….. nice. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 16. ………….. that your book? 17.I'm fine, thanks. ………….. how are you? 18.How do you …………….your name ? 19.Its name is Sao Mai ………….. school. 20.………….. up , please. III. Reorder these words into the correct sentence: 1.name / Phuong / My / is. ………………………………………… 2.is / Who / that/ ? ………………………………………… 3.are / How / you? ………………………………………… 4.come / May / I / in? ………………………………………… 5.meet / you / Nice / to /. ………………………………………… 6.your / What / name / is / ? 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work individually Work individually. Pair works. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 19/10/2014 Date of teaching: 23/10/2014 Period 35: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: be quiet, don’t talk, come here, open your book, close your book, sit down, stand up - Vocabulary: be quiet, boy, sir, sorry, please, class II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils do the exercises. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing hello song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 40 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mr loc and Ss give and respond to instructions. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mr Loc’s part, the other repeats Ss’ part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point, say and do actions - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Boy Sir Sorry Please class check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: be quiet = don’t talk come here open your book close your book sit down stand up Ask T requests and Ss do. - Model: Call some Ss request and the others do. Allocate the parts of the characters T and Ss do to Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 19/10/2014 Date of teaching: 24/10/2014 Period 36: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to make and respond to instructions. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up Play game: Simon says 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Open 2. Quiet 3. Close 4. Sit 5. Come 5. Stand - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Students’ actions Play game Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work in pairs. Listen and sing Do exercises in the Workbook. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Date of preparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: 27/10/2014. Period 37: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t - Vocabulary: speak, write, May I…, can, can’t II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make and respond to instructions. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Play game: Simon says Sing the song 1. Look, listen and repeat - Whole class. Have pupils look at their books (Page Look at the pictures in the 42). book Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the Listen and repeat lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s Read in pairs part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Speak Write May I… Can can’t = can not Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Elicits the structures May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures a, b, c, d. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment. Listen and correct. Have Ps practice. The rest listen to and give comment. Correct Ss’ error pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the work book. Date of preparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: 28/10/2014. Period 38: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils Ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Order the words 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 43. Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to match the pictures to the appropriate dialogues.” Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Work individually Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3-a, 4-b 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 43. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in Practise in pairs dialogue. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Come in 2. Sit down 3 close my book 4. open my book 4.Consolidation Do exercises in the Summary the lesson workbook 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Date of preparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: 30/10/2014. Period 39: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /k/, /d/ correctly. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: jumped words 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words come and down -Introduce the sounds /k/ and /d/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Work individually Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. of the listening text. Answer: 6. Let’s sing - Put the large piece of paper with the Come and sit down, Page 44, written on it on the board. Tell pupils that they are going to sing the Song. - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen while they are reading the song. - Play the recording again for pupils to read each line of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding words while they are repeating. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. Repeat the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts. - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: 31/10/2014. Period 40: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. 2. Skills: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the Come in and sit down song 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the text”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – e; 3 – b; 4 – d, 5- a. 6. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the pictures and name the characters in each picture, find out the situation read the sentences in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the sentences. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. sit 2. talk 3. Go out/ you can 4. go out/ you can’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: write and put the instructions in the box. Choose and ask them out Practice -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook. Date of preparing: 2/11/2014 Date of teaching: 3/11/2014. Period 41: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk about school facilities 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small. - Vocabulary: school, big, small, gym, library, computer room, playground Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask for and give permission, give and respond to instructions. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing Come on and sit down song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 46 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai talk about school facilities. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 46. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: School Big Small Gym Library computer room playground check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call some Ss to talk about school facilities. Ask them to point the pictures and make sentences. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some Ss to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Pactise in pairs Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook Date of preparing: 2/11/2014 Date of teaching: 4/11/2014. Period 42:. UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to talk about school facilities - Develop Ss writing and listening skills + Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: New lesson:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(5’). Students’activities - Do exercises. Jumped words 4. Listen and tick(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. - Indentify the characters in each picture 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look, read and write(10’) - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are doing. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in 4 sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1.class 2. Library 3. Computer room 4. gym - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing(10’) - Introduce The This is the way to go to school song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. - Listen and tick. - Indentify the characters in each picture. - Work individually. - Listen and sing. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 2/11/2014 Date of teaching: 6/11/2014. Period 43: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school facilities - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. + Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s small. - Vocabulary: new, old, large, small, II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’activities - Sing the song. Warm up(5’) Sing This is the way to go to school song 1. Look, listen and repeat. (10’) - Look at the - Have Ss to look at the book at page 48. pictures in the - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. - Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Listen and - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: New Old - Read in pairs Large small Check vocab: what and where - Elicits the structures Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 7.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Is your school big?- Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. It’s small. 2. Point and say(10’) - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48 - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - T models/ allocates the parts of characters Hoa and Nam, Quan to Ss - Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures - Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. - Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk(10’)Show picture and give task. - Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment - Listen and correct. - Have Ps practice. The rest listen and give the remark. - Correct Ss’ pronunciation. - Look at pictures. 4. - Point to the pictures and practise - Play role and speak out. - Work in pair practice talking:. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 2/11/2014 Date of teaching: 7/11/2014. Period 44: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about school facilities. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills + Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(10’) Chatting - Asks Ss to make question and answer about school facilities. 4. Listen and number(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 49. 5.Read and circle(10’). Students’activities - Practise in pairs - Look at the pictures in the book. - Listen number. -. and. Answer. - Look at pictures. 3. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to circle the best answer.” - Have a revision of the language: - Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - Work - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Individually - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. the - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of - Read paragraph the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – big; 2 – small; 3-new; 4-big 6. Write about your schoo(10’) - Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to read the sentences. Tell pupils that they are going to read and Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. answer the question - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of - Practise in pairs the reading text. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Date of preparing: 9/11/2014 Date of teaching: 10/11/2014. Period 45: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about school facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /g/, /l/ correctly. - Develop Ss writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’activities - Ask and answer.. Warm up(10’) - Chatting 1. Listen and repeat(10’) - Ask ps to practice in - Asks Ss to make question and answer about school pairs facilities - Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. - Look at the pictures in - Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently the book in the words gym and look. - Introduce the sounds /g/and /l/ Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have Ps practice the sounds carefully. - Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. 2. Listen and write(10’) - Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you - Listen and repeat + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups - Look at 2 sentences for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. gym 2. look - Listen and fill in the 3. Let’s chant(10’) blank - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Listen to the tape and -The Ps chant and do the action. repeat the chant. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.- Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 9/11/2014 Date of teaching: 11/11/2014. Period 46: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk, ask and answer question about school facilities. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills Language focus: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(5’) - Ask Ss to read the chant. - Introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the text”. - Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - 4. Read and match(10’) - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – d; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – b. 5. Read and complete(10’) - Explains the situation and how to do the exercise - Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. - Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. - Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. playground 2. It 3. Gym 4. Classroom 5. nice 6. Project(10’) - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: talk about school facilities - Ss act out in front of the class. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities - Read the chant - Look at the sentences in the book - Read and Work individually - Work in pairs. - Fill the suitable words in the blanks. - Work 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. individually. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Date of preparing: 9/11/2014 Date of teaching: 13/11/2014. Period 47: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify school things. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: This/That is my pen. - Vocabulary: pen, rubber=eraser, pencil, pencil case=pencil box, school bag, notebook, book, pencil sharpener II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: (1’) Teacher’s activities Students’activities Warm up(5’) - Read the chant Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat(10’) - Look at the - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page pictures in the 52 and what they are saying. book - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mr Robot to identify school things. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. - Asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. 2. Point and say(10’) - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai - Listen and repeat Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Pen Rubber = eraser pencil pencil case = pencil box school bag notebook book pencil sharpener check vocab: rub out and remember Model sentence: This/That is my pen - Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters - Look and find Mai and Phong to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures out the model and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. sentences Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when - Point the necessary. pictures and - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the practise class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s talk(10’) - Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. - Pactise in pairs - Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out - Correct their pronunciation IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 9/11/2014 Date of teaching: 14/11/2014. Period 48: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify school things. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Develop Ss writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up (5’) Sing a song 4. Listen and tick(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures a, b on page 53 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. 5. Look, read and write(10’) - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Ruler/is 2. pen/It is - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s play(10’) Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities - Whole class. - Indentify the characters in each picture. - Listen and tick. - Indentify the characters in each picture. - Work individually. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Introduce the game Slap the board to pupils. - Explain how the game is played - Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Play game - When the time is up, call on some groups to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the sentences practised to reinforce their pronunciation. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 16/11/2014 Date of teaching: 17/11/2014. Period 49: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: These/Those are my books - Vocabulary: notebooks, pens, pencil cases, rubbers, books, pencils (plural nouns) II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’activities Warm up(5’) - Whole class Jumped words - Key: 1. enps, 1. pens, 2. enpcil scaes, 2. pencil cases, 3. bbersru, 3. rubbers, 4. oboks, 4. books, 5. cipenls 5. pencils 4. Look, Listen and repeat(10’) - Look at the - Have Ss to look at the book on page 54. pictures in the - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Listen and - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part repeat and the other repeat Mr Robot’ part. - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Read in pairs - Teach grammar: Most singular nouns + s => plural nouns Ex: books/ notebooks/ pencils/ pens/ pencil cases/ rubbers. Notes: how to pronounce plural nouns - Elicits the structures: These/ Those are my books. 2. Point and say(10’) - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54 - Look at 4 - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pictures Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Models/ allocates the parts of characters Phong and Peter to Ss - Ask them to act out Peter. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures - Have Ss practice talking about school things in the - Point to the pictures. pictures and - Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct practise pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Play role and Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to speak out. reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: (10’) - Show picture and give task. - Have Ps work in pair. - Work in pair - Display in class, others comment practice talking: - Listen and correct. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 8.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of preparing: 16/11/2014 Date of teaching: 18/11/2014. Period 50: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school things. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: desk, school bag, nice, school things, new, old, too, table II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: (5’) Chatting - Asks Ss to talk about their school things. 4. Listen and number(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 55. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the suitable words to the sentences.” - Have a revision of the language: This/ That is and These/ those are….Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities - Practise individually - Look at the pictures in the book. - Listen number. and. - Answer - Look at pictures. 3. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and - Work comment. Individually Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. - Read the 5.Read and write(10’) paragraph Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. name; 2. Small/ nice; 3. School bag; 2. books/ notebooks; 5. Pencil cases/ pens - Have pupils open their books to Page 55. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in sentences. - Asks pupils practice and complete the sentences. - Practise - Asks pupils give their answers for correction. individually 1. are/ books/ pens 2. Are/ pencils/ rulers IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 16/11/2014 Date of teaching: 20/11/2014. Period 51: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify and talk about school things. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /r/, / / correctly . - Develop Ss writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’activities. Warm up(5’) Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Chatting - T asks Ss to talk about school things 1. Listen and repeat(10’) - Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. - Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words ruler and these - Introduce the sounds /r/ and / / - Have Ps practice the sounds carefully - Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. - Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Ask ps to practice Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences 2. Listen and write(10’) - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. Listen and fill in the blank - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Ps listen to the tape and Answer: chant 3. Let’s chant(10’) - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 16/11/2014 Date of teaching: 21/11/2014. Period 52: UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps identify and talk about school things. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(5’) Read the chant. Students’activities - Ask ps to read the chant. - Introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to - Look at the the text”. sentences in the 4. Read and match(10’) book - Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a - Read and Work appropriate picture.) individually - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary - Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction - Work in pairs - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c. 5. Read and complete(10’) - Explains the situation and how to do the exercise - Ask students to read the 5 sentences in the book and fill the suitable words. - Do exercise then practice in front of the whole class. The - Fill the suitable rest listen to and give the remark. words in the - Correct the pronunciation. blanks Answer: 1. name 2. This is 3. Those are/ pencils/ books 4. that’s 5. Those 6. Project(10’) - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw the school things and color them - Work - Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give individually the remark. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Focus on the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 23/11/2014 Date of teaching: 24/11/2014. Period 53: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(5’): Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities - Whole class. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Read the chant 1.Look, listen and repeat. (10’) - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 58 and what they are saying. - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Nam ask and answer question about school things. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. - Asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. - Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Model sentence: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is. Is that your pen? – No, it isn’t. - Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on some Ss. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some Ss to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s talk(10’) - Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. - Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out - Correct their pronunciation. - Look at the pictures in the book. - Listen repeat. and. - Look and find out the model sentences. - Point pictures practise. the and. - Pactise in pairs. IV.Consolidation(2) - Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Repeat the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 23/11/2014 Date of teaching: 25/11/2014. Period 54: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about school things. - Develop Ss writing, reading, and listening skills + Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’activ ities - Play game. Warm up(5’) Play chain game 3.Listen and tick(10’) - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 59 of the - Indentify the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the characters in pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are each picture going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers then give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the - Answer. listening text. 5. Look, read and write(10’) - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they - Work in are saying. pairs - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1,2,3 and 4. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. pen/ it is 3. School bag/ it is 2. pencil case/ it isn’t 4. Book/ it is - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally - Read and to reinforce their pronunciation. write 6. Let’s write(10’) - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue sentences. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: - Pair works. 1. School bag 2. school bag / it is 3. pencil case 4. Pencil case/ it isn’t IV.Consolidation(2’) Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 23/11/2014 Date of teaching: 27/11/2014. Period 55: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about colours. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Vocabulary: colour, red, green, blue, white, yellow, brown, orange II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up(5’) - Talk about school things 1. Look, listen and repeat(10’) - Have Ss to look at the book at page 60. - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. - Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases - Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say(10’) - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60 - Teach vocabulary: colour white Red yellow Green brown Blue orange Elicits the structures What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss - Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures - Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities - Practice - Look at the pictures in the book. - Listen and repeat. - Read in pairs. - Look at pictures. - Point to pictures practise. 4. the and. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to - Play role and reinforce their pronunciation. speak out. 3 - Let’s talk: (10’) - Show picture and give task. - Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment - Work in pair - Listen and correct. practice talking: - Have Ps practise IV.Consolidation(2’) Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. V. Homework(2’) - Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Date of preparing: 23/11/2014 Date of teaching: 28/11/2014. Period 56: UNIT 2: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Students’activities Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer about colour. Practise in pairs 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 61 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the Look at the pictures characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell in the book pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 9.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 61. Set the scene: “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the appropriate sentences.” Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3-a; 4- e; 5-c 6. Let’s sing - Introduce My new pen, Page 61. - Play the recording and listen to My new pen song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually Read the sentences then match. Practise in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook Date of preparing: 30/11/2014 Date of teaching: 1/12/2014. Period 57: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things and colours. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly . - Develop Ss writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about colours 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words it and orange -Introduce the sounds /i/ and /o/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 30/11/2014 Date of teaching: 2/12/2014. Period 58: UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things and colours. - Develop Ss reading, writing skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Students’activities Warm up: read the chant. Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the Ask ps to practice in Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. questions to get the information in order to match the suitable answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. green 2. desk 3. They 4. pens 5. Colour 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: color the rainbow. Talk about it with classmate. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. pairs Look at sentences in book Read and individually. the the Work. Work in pairs. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 30/11/2014 Date of teaching: 4/12/2014. Period 59: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAKTIME? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break-time activities. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What do you do at break time? – I play badminton. - Vocabulary: do, at break time, play, badminton, football, basketball, chess, table tennis II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: Sing My new pen 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture a, b on page 64 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda and Phong ask and answer questions about break time activities. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Play at break time Badminton football Basketball chess Table tennis do check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What do you do at break time? I play football. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Sing the song Look at pictures in book. the the. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Point the pictures and practise. Practise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 30/11/2014 Date of teaching: 5/12/2014. Period 60: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about break time activities. - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up Ask and answer about Ss’ name 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 65 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Greeting Indentify the characters in each picture. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in sentences 1, 2 and 3. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Chess 2. Table tennis 3. badminton - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Write about you - Have pupils open their books to Page 65. - Pupils write individually and complete the sentences. - Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work individually. Write the sentences individually. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 7/12/2014 Date of teaching: 8/12/2014. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Period 61: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. - Vocabulary: like, let’s, now, skipping, skating, hide-and-seek, blind man’s bluff II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: Ask and answer questions about break time activities 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 66. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Do the same with Nam’s part and peter’s part - Teach vocabulary: Like let’s Skipping skating Hide-and-seek blind man’s bluff - Elicits the structures Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do. Do you like hide- and- seek? - No, I don’t 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Linh and Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 7/12/2014 Date of teaching: 9/12/2014. Period 62: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes. - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: Chatting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 67. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to write the answer the questions.” Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. They play table tennis. 2. They like chess. 3. They like badminton. 6. Let’s sing - Tell pupils that they are going to sing the Hide-and-seek Song. - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen while they are reading the song. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Practise in pairs Look at pictures in book. the the. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs. Sing the song. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Play the recording again for pupils to read each line of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding words while they are repeating. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. Repeat the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts. - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4. Consolidation Summary the lesson 5. Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 7/12/2014 Date of teaching: 11/12/2014. Period 63: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break time activities, express likes and dislikes. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /bl/, /sk/ correctly . - Develop Ss writing and listening skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Students’activities Warm up: sing Hide-and-seek song - Sing the song 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words blind and skating -Introduce the sounds /bl/ and /sk/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Look at pictures in book. the the. Listen and repeat. Look at sentences. 2. Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 7/12/2014 Date of teaching: 12/12/2014. Period 64: UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break time activities, express likes and dislikes. - Develop Ss reading, writing skills Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match suitable answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – b; 2 – c; 3 – a; 4 – d. 5. Write about you -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look at the pictures in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph about themselves. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. 6. Project - Introduce the game to pupils. - Explain how the game is played. - Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Have the whole class listen and remark the sentences Ss Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Read the chant Look at sentences in book. the the. Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Fill the words blanks. suitable in the. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. make reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Work in group Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 14/12/2014 Date of teaching: 15, 16/12/2014. Period 65,66: REVIEW 2 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 6-10, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions.- Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 5 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 70 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’activities Ask ps to practice in pairs. Give identification. the. Listen and tick. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. school 2. Playground 3. room 4. Quan 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. a 4.c 5. d 5. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 71. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act out Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Work individually Listen and tick. Work individually. Work in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the Pair works class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation: Summary the lesson Do exercises in the 5.Homework workbook Date of preparing: 14/12/2014 Date of teaching: 18, 19/12/2014. Period 67,68: SHORT STORY I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 6 - 10. - Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:. Teacher’s activities. Students’act ivities Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 6 to unit 10 Ask ps to 1. Fill the gaps. Then listen and check practice in - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 on page 72 pairs of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers Give the - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess. identification - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story - Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answers Answer: 1. Hello 2. Meet you 3. Your/ Yes Listen and 4. chair/ armchair answer T’s Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Ask and answer the questions -Ask students to read the story in the book and find out the answers for the questions. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. It is white 2. No, it isn’t 3. It is red 3. It’s big 3. Number the sentences. Then act out in pairs Have Ps work in group. Read the story again and order the sentences to make the meaningful dialogue. Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Miu: Maurice, this is Chit. 2. Chit: Please to meet you, Maurice 3. Maurice: Please to meet you too 4. Chit: Is this your house? 5. Maurice: Yes, it is. 6. Chit: It’s big! 7. Maurice: That’s right. 4. Put the words in the correct order - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 73. Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get the information in order to order the words given. - Pupils order the words to make meaningful sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Is that your chair? Do you like hide-and-seek? 1. Pleased to meet you too. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. questions. Work in pairs. Work group. in. Pair work. Work individually Do exercises in the 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Let’s play hide – and – seek. Is this your house? workbook IV. Consolidation - Summary the lesson, focus on the main points of the lesson. V. Homework - Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 6 - 10 Date of preparing: 21/12/2014 Date of teaching: 22, 23/12/2014. Period 69,70: THE FIRST SEMESTER ENGLISH TEST AND CORRECTING PART 1: LISTENING ( 20 minutes) Question1. Listen and number. (1 pt) A.. B.. 0. C.. D. E.. Question2. Listen and write T (True) or F (False) as examples (1pt). 1. Look at this girl. Her name is Lan. 1. Good bye. See you later.. T F. 2. This is my computer room.. 3. What colour is your pen? It’s blue. 4. May I come in? 5. Let’s play.. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Question 3. Listen and draw the line. There is an example. ( 1 pt). 0. 1. 2. 3. Question 4. Listen and tick. (1 pt) a). 4 5. b). 1. a). b). a). b). a). b). 2.. 3.. 4. Question 5. Listen and complete. (1pt) A : (0) _Hello_, I’m Mai. What’s your (1)_______?. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG B. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. : My name’s (2) ________.. A : How old are you? B : I’m (3) ______ years old. A : What colour is your school bag? B. : It’s (4) _______.. PART II: READING AND WRITING (15 minutes):. Question 6. Look and read. Put a tick ( ) or cross (X) in the box. (1pt). 0. This is pen.. 0. This is a pencil.  X. 1. This is a school bag.. 2. We are in the school gym.. 3. May I close my book?. 4. These are my notebooks. Question 7. Look and read. Write Yes or No as example: (1pt).. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. a) This is a pen.. __ Yes ___. b) That is a desk.. ________. c) Is it a book? Yes it is.. ________. d) These are my pencil sharpeners.. ___________. Those are pencil cases. _________________. Question 8. Look at the pictures. Look at the letters. Write the words .(1 pt) 0. n p e. . pen. 1. r b e u b r . ______. 2. o l s h o c . ______. 3. o k o b . ____. 4. r i b y l a r . _______. Question 9. Choose a word from the box and write it next to numbers from 1-4. (1 pt) MY NEW SCHOOL Hello. My name is Hoa. I’m a pupil. This is my new (0) __school_. It’s big. I’m in class 3A. It’s a (1) ___________________. We read books in the (2) _____________. There is a (3) _____________ in my school. At break we (4) _______ hide and seek. I’m happy in my new school.. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. library. play. GRADE 3. school. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. computer room. small classroom. PART III: SPEAKING (1pt) (5’) Question10. 1. Listen and repeat. 2. Point, ask and answer. 3. Listen and comment. 4. Interview. PHÒNG GD &ĐT TX BA ĐỒN. ĐỀ THI (PHẦN NGHE) KHỐI 3 – HỌC KÌ I – NĂM HỌC : 2014 - 2015 Thời gian: (20 phút). Question 1: Listen and number. Ví dụ : 0/ What are these? They’re notebooks. 1/ What’s this? It’s a bag. 2/ Is the computer room small? No. it isn’t. It’s big. 3/ Is that your ruler? No. it isn’t. This is my ruler. 4/ This is my classroom. Is it new? Yes, it is. Question 2: Listen and write. Ví dụ : 01/ Look at that girl. Her name is Lan. 02/ Good morning! How are you? 1/ This is my computer room. 2/ What colour is your pen? It’s red. 3/ May I go out? Sure. 4/ Let’s play. Question 3: Listen and draw the lines. Ví dụ : 0. What’s this ? It’s a pen. 1/ - Is this a pencil? Yes, it is. 2/ - That is a rubber. 3/ - Is this your ruler? Yes it is 4/ - This is my book. Question 4: Listen and tick. 1/ Stand up! 2/ Close your books. 3/ This is a pencil Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 4/ What do you do at break time? I play football. Question 5: Listen and complete. A : (0) _Hello_, I’m Mai. What’s your (1)_name_? B. : My name’s (2) _Tony_.. A : How old are you? B : I’m (3) _eight_ years old. A : What colour is your school bag? B. : It’s (4) _pink_.. PHÒNG GD &ĐT TX BA ĐỒN. III. SPEAKING (5 minutes) Question 10. (Hỏi thi nói ngay sau khi thu bài Kiểm tra Đọc – Viết – Nghe ) 1. Listen and repeat. (0.25pt) Giáo viên nói hoặc mở băng 2 câu để cả lớp nhắc lại: - My classroom is small but nice. - May I go out? Sure. - Are Peter and Mary your friends ? Yes, they are. - Hi. I am Mary. I’m seven years old. 2. Point, ask and answer.(0.25pt) Giáo viên chỉ vào một người hay một vật và hỏi cả lớp 2 câu (theo chương trình đã học) VD: - Who’s that ? - Are they big ? - How old is she/ he? - What colour is this ? 3. Listen and comment. (0.25pt) Giáo viên chỉ vào người, đồ vật ,thiên nhiên và nói 1 câu đúng và 1 câu sai để học sinh đồng thanh cho ý kiến với Yes hoặc No ( Tùy theo trình độ của học sinh mà chuẩn bị câu bình luận hoặc yêu cầu học sinh phải đưa ra câu đúng) VD: GV: Is your school bag big?. GV: Are they your books ? HS: Yes ,it is. HS: Yes, they are. 4. Interview.(0.25pt) Giáo viên hỏi cả lớp 2 câu để học sinh trả lời đồng thanh , nội dung câu trả lời có thể khác nhau nhưng phải thể hiện học sinh hiểu đúng câu hỏi. Hoặc giáo viên có thể cho học sinh chia nhóm và cặp hỏi nhau theo chủ đề trong 1 phút . Giáo viên quan sát sự tham gia của học sinh và cho điểm. VD: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - What’s your name ? - How do you spell your name ? - How old are you ? - Is your classroom big ?. PHÒNG GD &ĐT TX BA ĐỒN. HƯỚNG DẪN CHẤM TIẾNG ANH LỚP 3 HỌC KÌ I NĂM HỌC : 2014 - 2015 PART I. LISTENING (20 minutes). Question 1: Listen and number. (1 point)(0,25 điểm /1 hình). 1/C. 2/B. 3/E. 4/D. Question 2: Listen and write. (1 point) (0,25 điểm / 1 câu). 1/T. 2/F. 3/F. 4/T. Question 3: Listen and draw the lines. (1 point) (0,25 điểm /1 hình). 1/pencil. 2/rubber. 3/ruler. 4/book. Question 4: Listen and tick. (1 point) (0,25 điểm /1 hình). 1/a. 2/b. 3/a. 4/a. Question 5: Listen and complete. (1 point) (0,25 điểm / 1 từ ). (1) name .. (2) Tony. (3) eight. (4) pink. PART II . READING AND WRITING. (15 minutes) Question 6: Look and read. Put a tick () or cross (X) in the box. (1 point) (0,25 điểm / 1 hình).. 1, . 2. X. 3. X. 4. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Question 7: Look and read . Write Y (Yes) or N (No) as example.(1 point) (0,25 điểm /1 câu). a.Yes. b. No. c.No. d. Yes. e. No. Question 8: Look at the pictures. Look at the letters. Write the words: (1 point) (0,25 điểm / 1 câu.) 1.rubber. 2. school. 3.book. 4. library. Question 9: Choose a word from the box and write it next to numbers from 1- 4. (1point) (0,25 điểm /1 từ) .1. small classroom. 2. library. 3. computer room. 4. play. Date of preparing: 04/1/2015 Date of teaching: 05/1/2015. Period 71: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- He’s my father./ She’s my mother. - Vocabulary: man, next to, him, father, mother, young, nice, sister, brother, grandmother, grandfather, he, she II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting. Students’ actions Pair works. 1. Look, listen and repeat.. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Look at the pictures in the book 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai identify family members. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 6. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: man next to father mother young nice sister brother grandmother grandfather he she check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: Who’s that? - He’s my father./ She’s my mother. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 04/1/2015 Date of teaching: 06/1/2015. Period 72: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: photo, woman, girl, boy, her, family II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about Ss’ name Greeting 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 7 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the Indentify the characters characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. in each picture Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the Listen and tick partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. of the listening text. 5. Read and complete - Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and who they are in the photo. Teach vocabulary: Photo woman Girl boy Her family Happy of Check vocab: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going look the photo and read the sentences to get information to write the missing words. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Father 2. Mother 3. brother - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce A happy family song, Page 7. - Play the recording and listen to A happy faamily song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work individually. Listen and sing. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 04/1/2015 Date of teaching: 06/1/2015. Period 73: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the ages of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How old is your brother? – He is seven. - Vocabulary: eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing A happy family song Sing the song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 8. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they book are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines Listen and repeat in the speech bubbles two times. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Eleven twelve Thirteen fourteen Fifteen seventeen Eighteen nineteen Twenty thirty Forty fifty Sixty seventy Eighty ninety one hundred Check vocab: rub out and remember - Elicits the structures How old is your brother? – He is seven 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the age of Nam’s family Have Ps work in pair. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 04/1/2015 Date of teaching: 08/1/2015. Period 74: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the age of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: picture, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce their family members. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Talk about the age of family members. 4. Listen and number Practise in pairs - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 6. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 9. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the ages of Quan’s family members Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: Quan-10; His father-forty-four; His mother-thirty-nine; His brother-fourteen 6. Write about your family - Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to answer the ages of their family members - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually Read the paragraph. Practise in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 11/1/2015 Date of teaching: 12/1/2015. Period 75: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /br/, /gr/ correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members Ask ps to practice in pairs 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words brother and grandmother -Introduce the sounds /br/ and /gr/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 76: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c. 5. Read and complete Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the photo of Linda’s family Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 11. read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. family 2. father 3. mother 4. brother 5. sister 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw their family. Tell the classmates about it -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 19 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 77: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able rooms in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: There is a living room. - Vocabulary: house, garden, over there, kitchen, bathroom, bedroom, dining room, garden II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 12 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: House garden over there kitchen bathroom bedroom dining room garden check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: There is a living room. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify the rooms in Nam’s house. Call some pairs to act out Pactise in pairs Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 78: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to indentify rooms in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up Talk about their houses 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 13 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. A house 2. A living room 3.a kitchen 4. Bedroom 5. a bathroom 6.a kitchen. Students’ actions Ss practise Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually. Listen and sing. - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The way I clean my house song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new workbook words and structures.. WEEK: 20 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 79: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t. - Vocabulary: fence, pond, gate, yard, fence II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1.Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 14. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Fence pond Gate yard fence - Elicits the structures Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to talk about Tony’s house - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 20 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 80: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: There is not a yard - Vocabulary: any, around, but, beautiful, in front of, tree, in II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the song 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and complete. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 4 pictures. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities to get the information in order to fill the given words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: Any around But beautiful in front of tree in Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: There is not a yard Have a revision of the language Work Individually Ask Ss to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities and fill the given words in the blanks. Read the paragraph and do Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary the exercise Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. House; 2. Beautiful; 3. Tree; 4. Pond 6. Write about your house - Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to read the questions and answer about their houses facilities. - Pupils practice in pairs to ask and answer questions about their houses. Practise in pairs - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Ask Ss to talk about their houses. - Have the whole class listen and reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework Do exercises in the - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new workbook words WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 81: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ch/ /, th/ / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: behind II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: - T asks Ss to make question and answer about houses 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kitchen and bathroom -Introduce the sounds ch/ / and th/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs. Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 82: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and write. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss look at Mai’s house and find the house facilities read the paragraph individually and check their answers. Ss do the task Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Read the paragraph in the book Read and Work individually 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. house; 2. pond; 3. tree; 4. living. 5. Read again and write the answers -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in part 4 in the book of page 17 and answer the questions. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, it isn’t. 2. It is blue. 3. Yes, there is. 4. Yes, there is. 5. No, there isn’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour their houses. Write the names of the rooms in the houses -Ss introduce their houses in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Work in group. Read the paragraph and answer the questions in pairs. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 83: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there. - Vocabulary: Where, chair, poster, bed, picture, coat, ball, here, there II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 18 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and his mother ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats his mother’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Where chair Poster bed Picture coat Ball here there Check vocab: what and where Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Model sentence: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call someone to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 84: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer a bout he specific information. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about Ss’ name and spell it Greeting 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page19 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in Indentify the characters the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that in each picture they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the Listen and tick partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete - Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are Indentify the characters saying mention the distance between the hand and the in each picture thing in picture. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the given words in sentences 1, 2, 3 and 4. Work individually - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for Work in pairs correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Here 2. There 3. Here 4. there - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the The poster and the ball song, Page 19. - Play the recording and listen the How are you? song Listen and sing - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the contain of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words and structures. Workbook. WEEK: 22 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 85: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of things in the house (plural). 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. - Vocabulary: near, under, on, behind, look in Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the poster and the ball song Sing the song 2. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 20. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in Listen and repeat the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their Read in pairs pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Near under On behind look in preposition(prep) Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 20 Look at 4 pictures Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Quan and Linda to Ss use structure: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Point to the pictures and practise. Practice in pairs Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 22 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 86: UNIT 3: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house (plural) 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: bed, ball II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 21 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on Look at the picture page 21. Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions the paragraph about phong’s room and find out the answer.” Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Work In pairs Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Read the dialogues in pairs Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. It is on the bed. 2, They are under the bed 3, They are near the desk. 4, They are on the desk. 5, They are on the wall 6. Write about your bedroom - Explain how to do the exercise T introduces the topic “you are going to write the Work individually paragraph about their houses” Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Do exercises in the 5.Homework workbook - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words WEEK 22 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 87 UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words chair and where -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 88: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: read chant. 4. Read and tick. T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable picture. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read chant Look at the sentences in the book 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in groups to do the exercise then explain how to Read and Work choose the picture in front of the whole class. The rest individually listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Work individually Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the reading text Answers: picture c. 5.Read and write T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw your bedroom and describe it to your classmates - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work individually. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 23 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 89: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about things in the room. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t - Vocabulary: any, map, sofa, wardrobe, cupboard II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 24 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Any map Sofa wardrobe cupboard Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about things in the room. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 23 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 90: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about things in the room. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about things in the room. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1 and 2 on page 25 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look, read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what are there in the picture. - Tell Ss that they are going to read the sentences and write the missing words to fill in the blanks. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 2. Cupboard 3. Map 4. chairs - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real things in their houses to answer them. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work in pairs. Answer the questions. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. questions - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK: 23 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 91: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How many chairs are there? - There are six. - Vocabulary: How many, cup, fan, mirror, door, window, count II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 1.Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 26. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: How many cup Fan mirror Door window count - Elicits the structures How many chairs are there? - There are six 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. about quantity of things. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 23 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 92: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about quantity Practise in pairs of things. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at picture on page 27 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and write Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find out the information to answer the questions. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions” Have a revision of the language. Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. There is one door. 2. There are two windows. 3. There are eight chairs. 4. There are four pictures. 5. There are two fans. 6. Let’s play - Introduce the game Spot the difference to pupils. - Explain how the game is played. Pupils find out the difference things in the pictures - Pupils play the game then report in front of the class. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - When the time is up, call on some Ss to demonstrate Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work Individually Read the paragraph, ask and answer questions in pairs. Work individually. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Correct the mistake and pronunciation if necessary. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 93: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to describe their rooms Ask ps to practice 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Look at the pictures in the Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in book the words fan and cup Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 94: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and circle. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and choose the best answer”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Are; 2. is; 3. lamps; 4. Chairs; 5. on 5. Read and write -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look at the picture and identify the things in the room. Read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Fill the suitable words in the blanks 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. is 2. chairs 3. T.V 4. pictures 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Interview their friends and complete the table using the structure: How many … are there? – There are/ There is…. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in group. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 95: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Do you have a doll?-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t - Vocabulary: have, teddy bear, doll, car, puzzle, robot II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe things in the room. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 30 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda identifying toys. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Have teddy bear Doll car Puzzle robot check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Do you have a doll? -Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation and mistake. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Practise in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 96: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm – Identify toys. Pairs work 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the Indentify the characters characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell in each picture pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the Listen and number partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are. Teach vocabulary: Shelf pretty - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in paragraph. - Ss read silently and complete the paragraph. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Car 2. Ball 3. Doll 4. Do 5. they - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real toys they have to answer. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions about the toys. - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work individually. Listen and sing. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK: 25 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 97: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t. - Vocabulary: yo-yo, ship, plane, kite II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to talk about toys 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped letters 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 32. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in Listen and repeat the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their Read in pairs pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: yo-yo ship plane kite Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Quan and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about toys. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in pairs practice talking:. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 98: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the toys Ss have. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 33 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and write Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 33. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions about Phong’s toys.” Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. He has a robot. 2. She has a teddy bear. 3. Yes, he does. 4. She has a yo-yo and a puzzle. 5. No, he doesn’t. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The Linda has a little doll song, Page 33. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work In pair to ask and answer the questions. Sing the song. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 99: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, and ask and answer questions about toys. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /pl/, / / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words plane and ship -Introduce the sounds /pl/ and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 100: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, ask and answer questions about the toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the song: Linda has a little doll. 4. Read and complete. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the words given to the blanks”. Ss look at the picture and find out the situation and the toys in the picture Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. toys; 2. orange; 3. two; 4. ship; 5. green 5. Write about you - Have pupils open their books to Page 35. Tell pupils that they are going to read and use the real information about themselves to write the sentences about their toys. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: make a paper toy and ask, answer questions about toys -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the picture in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work in pairs. Pairs work. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook WEEK 26 Date of preparing: Date of teaching: Period 101: REVIEW 3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11 Ask ps to practice in pairs to unit 15 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the Give the identification characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer Listen and tick with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. of the listening text. Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 36 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. house 2. bedrooms 3. bathroom 4. small 5. There 5. They 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work individually Listen and tick. Work individually. Work in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.c 2. a 3. d 4.b 6. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books. Pair works Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: Date of teaching: Period 102: SHORT STORY I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Do the exercises. Correct exercise. 3. New lesson: Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit 11 to unit 15 1. Read the story. Put these lines in the correct bubbles. Then listen and check. - Read the sentences given and read the story about Cat and Mouse 3 - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 on page 38 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do the exercise. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story - Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answers Answer: 1. Who is Mimi? 2. How many brothers and sisters do you have? 3. Where are they? 4. How many rooms are there in your house? 2. Correct the answer -Ask students to read the story in the book and read the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct the false sentences. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, he has two sister. 2. No, he has a brother. 3. No, he is Jack. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ask ps to practice in pairs. Read the sentences. Give the identification Work in pairs. Listen and answer T’s questions. Work in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4. There are eight rooms. 3. Unscramble these words from the conversation Have Ps work individually. Read the story again and order the letters to make the meaningful words. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. . - Have the whole class read each word in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: a. sister b. brother c. house d. rooms e. hello f. mouse 4. Complete the conversation between Miu and Mimi - Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39. Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words to complete the meaningful dialogue. - Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: Miu: Name/is Mimi: name Miu: to meet you Mimi: Nice to meet you. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in group Pair work. Read and do exercise in pairs.. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Do exercises in the 5.Homework workbook - Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15. WEEK 26 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 105: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Do you have any pets?–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have…. - Vocabulary: dog, pet, cute, cat, parrot, rabbit, goldfish II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting 1.Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Quan and Mai ask and answer questions about pets. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s, Quan’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Dog pet Cute cat Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Pair works Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Parrot rabbit goldfish Check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: Do you have any pets? –Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have…. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 27 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 106: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer about pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: in the cage, in the fish tank II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer about pets. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Jumped words Work individually 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in Indentify the characters the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that in each picture they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the Listen and tick partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to Indentify the characters identify the characters in the picture and who they are in in each picture the picture. Teach vocabulary: In the cage in the fish tank Pet shop bird Check vocab: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going look the picture and read Work individually the paragraph to get information, find out the suitable words to write in the blanks. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers for correction Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Dog 2. cats 3. Birds 5. Goldfish - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to write the answers about the pets they have - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Write the answer individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK: 27 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 107: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able ask and answer questions about the location of pets 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are the cats? – They are under the table. - Vocabulary: over there, with, in the garden, flower pot, fish tank II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss write the new words 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting about the pets 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 42. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: over there with in the garden flower pot fish tank Check vocab: rub out and remember - Elicits the structures Where are the cats? – They are under the table. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Students’ actions Pairs work Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the location of pets. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do the exercise in the wwwwworkbook Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 27 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 108: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: picture, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Talk about the location of pets. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 43 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. They should guess the answer. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and complete. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Ask Ss to open the book on page 9. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the missing words about the pets and the location of the pets. Have a revision of the language Work Individually Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Read the paragraph Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Pets 2. Cat/on 3. Dog/ under 4. parrots/ rabbit/ garden 6. Let’s sing - Introduce Do you have any pets song, Page 43. Sing the song Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Play the recording and listen to the song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework Do exercises in the - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new workbook words WEEK 28 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 109: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils talk about the location of pets they have. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Sing the song: Do you have any pets? 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words dog and parrot -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 110: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b. 5. Read and write -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the picture of Mai’s pets. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 45. Read the paragraph and questions in the book and Answer the questions write the answers. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. She is 8 years old 2. Yes, she does. 3.She has a dog, Two goldfish and two parrots. 4.It’s at the door. 5.They are in the fish tank 6. Project Work individually - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw their pets. Tell the classmates about it -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Vb89Do exercises in the words workbook WEEK 28 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 111: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys 2. Skills: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What toys do you like? - I like ships - Vocabulary: ship, truck, kite, plane, train II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 46 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Mai ask and answer questions about toys. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Ship truck Kite plane train check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: What toys do you like - I like ships. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions Pactise in pairs about toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 112: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up Talk about toys 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. playroom 2. planes 3. dolls 4. ships 5. kites 6. trucks. Students’ actions Ss practise Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and tick. Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually. Listen and sing. - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to write Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. the answers about the toys they have - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new workbook words and structures.. WEEK: 29 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 113: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How many parrots do you have?- I have five parrots - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to talk about their toys they have 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting about toys Pairs work Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 1.Look, Listen and repeat Have Ss to look at the book at page 48. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Quan’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Elicits the structures How many parrots do you have?- I have 5 parrots. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48 Elicit the characters in the pictures and guess what are they talking about. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to talk about quantity - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 29 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period: 114: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: different II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the toys they have. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: guessing games Group works 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49 Look at the pictures in the of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the book characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and Listen and number number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Ps answer of the listening text. 5.Read and complete Look at 4 pictures Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 49. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about children’s toys to get the information in order to fill the suitable words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: Different Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph about children’s toys and fill the suitable words in the blanks. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen Work Individually and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of Read the paragraph and do the sentences. the exercise Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Dogs/ parrots; 2. Cats/ dog; 3. goldfish 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to write the answers about the toys and the quantity of toys they have Practise in pairs - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework Do exercises in the - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new workbook Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. words WEEK 29 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period: 115: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys and quantity. Pronounce the sounds in the letters Kite/ai/,/e/ ship /i/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: behind II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chain game Group work 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kite and ship -Introduce the sounds i/ai/ e / /and ship / i / Listen and repeat -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 29 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 116: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about toys and quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to match the suitable questions to the answers Read the questions and answers individually then matching. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book of page 51 and answer the questions. Work individually to find out the suitable words to fill in the blanks then give the answer in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. trucks. 2. ten. 3. has. 4. cats. 5. How 6. Project - Introduce the situation. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Read the paragraph in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs. Read the paragraph and answer the questions ind individually. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour the toys and the pets they have. -Ss introduce their toys and their pets in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 117: UNIT 13: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What are you doing?- I am reading. - Vocabulary: doing, reading, cooking, listening to music, cleaning the floor II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys they have. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on book page 52 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Hoa Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Hoa’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 52. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Doing reading Cooking listening to music cleaning the floor Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What are you doing? - I am reading. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call pairs to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in pairs. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 workbook. WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period upload.123doc.net: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about one’s action in progress Pairs work 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 53 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in Indentify the characters the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that in each picture they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the Listen and tick partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Explain the situation and how to do exercise. Ss are going to read the paragraph about Mai’s family’s action in progress - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the answers for questions What are they doing? - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. reading 2. Is listening to music 3. are cooking - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Explain how to do the exercise T introduces the topic “you are going to write the answers for the questions about your action in progress” Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work individually Work in pairs. Listen and sing. Do exercises in the Workbook. WEEK: 30 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Period 119: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. - Vocabulary: singing, drawing, playing the piano, watching TV, doing one’s homework II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: talk about Ss’ (in class) action in progress Individually work 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Look at the pictures in the Have Ss to look at the book at page 54. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in Listen and repeat the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat his father’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat Read in pairs each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Singing drawing playing the piano watching TV Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. doing one’s homework Check vocab: Rub out and remember - Elicits the structures What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54 Elicit the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss use structure: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Practice in pairs Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 120: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: skating II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the someone’s action in progress. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and match Explain how to do exercise on page 55. Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions and match the suitable answer.” Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at the picture. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some pairs to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.c 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the I love my parents song, Page 55. - Play the recording and listen the song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work in pairs Read the questions and answers in pairs. Sing the song. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 121: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ea/ i: /, aw / / correctly . 2. Skills: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: sing I love my parents song 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words reading and drawing -Introduce the sounds ea/ i: / and aw / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 122: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(215)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and complete. T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable words to fill in the blanks. Work individually to do the exercise then explain how to choose the words given to fill in the blanks in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the reading text Answers: 1. is. 2. In 3. Watching 4. playing 5. listening 5. Let’s write. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work individually. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph about Quan’s family the questions and write Work individually the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Answer: 1. His family is at home. 2. He is watching TV. 3. She is playing the piano. 4. He is listening to music. 5. He is singing. 6. Project Work individually - Introduce the situation. Ask Ss observe the pictures and talk about what children are doing. - Explain how to do the exercise: tell your classmates what they are doing. - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(216)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 123: UNIT 19: THEY ARE IN THE PARK. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What are they doing? - They are skating. - Vocabulary: in the park, skating, cycling, skating, flying kites, skipping II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: read the chant 1.Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 58 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Mrs Lan and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on someone. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s part, and Mrs Lan’s part Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(217)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: in the park skating cycling flying kites skipping Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What are they doing? - They are skating. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Linda to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about activities in the park. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look and find out the model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Pactise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 124: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(218)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about activities in the park. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: sports, games, football, happy, today II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about activities in Practise in pairs the park. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1a, b and 2a, b on page 59 Indentify the characters of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the in each picture characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the Listen and tick boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write Indentify the characters - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to in each picture identify the characters in the pictures and what they are doing. - Teach vocabulary: Sports games Football happy Work individually Today Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(219)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Check vocabulary: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going to read the paragraph and write the missing words to fill in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. In the park 2. Playing football 3. skipping 4. Is cycling 5. flying kites - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about yourself to answer them. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures.. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Answer the questions. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK: 32 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 125: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(220)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny. - Vocabulary: weather, like, great, sunny, rainy, cloudy, windy, snowy, stormy II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song 1.Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 60. Look at the pictures in the Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are book saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Listen and repeat Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat Mai’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their Read in pairs pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Weather like Great sunny Rainy cloudy Windy snowy Stormy Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(221)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. Work in talking:. pair. practice. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 126: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(222)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at picture on page 61 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look, read and write Ask Ss to read the questions and observe the picture find out the information to answer the questions. Set the scene: “you are going to read the question and observe the pictures in order to answer the questions” Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(223)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. Have a revision of the language. Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. cloudy 2. Windy 3. Rainy 4. sunny 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The weather song, Page 61. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Work Individually Read the question then answer it using the cues in the pictures. Sing the song. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 32 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 127: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ai/ /, a-e/ / correctly. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(224)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words rainy and skate -Introduce the sounds ai/ / and a-e/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat. Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(225)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Ps listen to the tape and chant. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 32 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 128: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(226)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to match the suitable answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some pairs to report their answers and explain how to choose the answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. c; 2. d; 3. b; 4. e; 5. a 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill the words given to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. weather 2. park 3. flying 4. playing 5. skating 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and color a weather icon for tomorrow’s weather in S’s place. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually. Work in pairs. Fill the suitable words in the blanks. Work individually. Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 33 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(227)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Period 129: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer about places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where’s Sa Pa?- It’s in north Vietnam - Vocabulary: north, south, central, beautiful II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the weather. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 64 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda ask and answer questions about places”. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 64. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: North south Central beautiful check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Where’s Sa Pa? Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Look and find out the 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(228)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - It’s in north Vietnam Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Quan to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs ask and answer questions about places. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation and mistake. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 model sentences. Point the pictures and practise. Practise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook. Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 130: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(229)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up – Ask and answer questions about places. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 65 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are. Teach vocabulary: city Ha long bay place town village bridge market - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Thang Long bridge/north Vietnam 2. Ben Thanh market/south Vietnam - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Pairs work Indentify the characters in each picture. Listen and number. Indentify the characters in each picture. Work individually. Listen and sing. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(230)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about their places to answer. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions about their places. - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words and structures. workbook WEEK: 33 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 131: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t. - Vocabulary: near, far from, far, distance II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(231)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. - Ask Ss to talk about toys 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Warm up: Jumped letters 6. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 66. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Near far from Far distance Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters of the children to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. Students’ actions Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and repeat. Read in pairs. Look at 4 pictures. Point to the pictures and practise. Play role and speak out.. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(232)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about distance. Work in pairs practice - Display in class, others comment talking: Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook. WEEK 33 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 132: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(233)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson. Teacher’s actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the distance. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 67. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information about Nam’s places in order to fill the suitable words in the blanks” Teach vocab: Theater now Temple lake Museum water puppet theater - Check vocab: Slap the board Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Name 2. Near 3. Theater 4. far 6. Let’s play Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. Students’ actions Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book. Listen and number. Ps answer Look at 3 pictures. Work In pair to ask and answer the questions. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(234)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. - Explain how the game is played: pupils play in pairs. Play game - When the time is up, call on pairs to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to reinforce their pronunciation. Follow up: - Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their classmates / friends. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Do exercises in the words workbook * Structure: It is big. It is small. III. Teaching methods: Communicate methods. IV. Teaching aids: Teaching plan , English book, pictures, cassette player, picture. V. Procedure: T T’ activities SS’ activitives Contents 3' I. Greeting: -Ask Ss some questions. -Answer How are you? ................................ What day is it today? .................................. 5' II. Warm up: -Ask Ss to speak about -Practice speaking. It’s Sao Mai Primary some schools. shool. III. New lesson: …………………… 10' 3. Read and Match. -Have ss turn their books to page 51. -Open the book and -Ask Ss to look at 4 look at the book. pictures in the book and tell the different between The answer: them. -Guide the way to do. 1: c -Tell Ss they are going to -Listen. 2: a read the sentences to get Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(235)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. 10'. 5'. 2'. the information in order to match to the right picture. -Work in pairs. -Call 1 Ss to talk about the answer. 4. Let's sing. -Write the song “ Small and Big” on a paper and hang on the board. -Ask Ss to look at the song and practice speaking aloud. -Ask Ss to read aloud in chorus. -Call some Ss to read individually. -Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen. -Play the recording again and stop at each sentence. -Call some Ss to perform in front of the class. IV. Consolidation:. -Ask Ss to sing again the song. V. Homelink:. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015 3: d 4: b. -Listen. -Look at the board.. -Read aloud the song. -Read in chorus. -Read individually. -Listen to the recording.. Small and Big The music room’s small. The classroom’s small. Hi- ho the derry - o They are so small. The school is big. The library’s big. Hi- ho the derry - o They are very big.. -Listen and repeat. -Sing the song. -Sing the song. -Prepare 1,2 in lesson 3 Page 52). -Do part D in workbook..  Experience: ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………….… Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(236)</span> TRƯỜNG TH QUẢNG LONG. Teacher: Trương Thị Mỹ Lệ. GRADE 3. NĂM HỌC 2014-2015. 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(237)</span>